Owners Manual - e-Auto Appraise Login

Owners Manual - e-Auto Appraise Login
2017 Cherokee
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2017
17KL74-126-AB
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4
5
SAFETY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
5
6
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
6
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
7
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
9
10
MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
10
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
11
12
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
▫ Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .7
▫ Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger cars. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars, both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission,
and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles
on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
with experience. When driving off-road, or working the
vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle, or expect the vehicle to
overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial, and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision.
Refer to “Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
INTRODUCTION
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
5
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Rollover Warning Label
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
1
6 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
7
1
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
CONTENTS
䡵 FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
䡵 REAR VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment
2 — Windshield
3 — Daytime Running Lights
4 — Wheels/Tires
5 — Exterior Mirrors
6 — Doors
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
REAR VIEW
2
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
12 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents
2 — Multifunction Lever
3 — Steering Wheel
4 — Instrument Cluster
5 — Windshield Wiper Lever
6 — Glove Compartment
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 13
INTERIOR
2
Interior Features
1 — Power Window Switches
2 — Seats
3 — Transmission Gear Selector
4 — Climate Controls
5 — Switch Panel
6 — Uconnect Radio
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Vehicle On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .27
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument
Cluster Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation
— If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .32
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .29
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
3
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .55
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .56
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Electrochromic Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . .60
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .61
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats . . . . . . . .52
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Rear Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .62
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped . . . . . .70
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Manual Climate Control Without A Touchscreen
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Climate Controls With A Touchscreen . . . . . . . . .79
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Ambient Light Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Dome Light Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Interior Light Defeat (Off). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) . . . . .67
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . .67
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection . . . .93
▫ Reset Auto-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Window Lockout Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
3
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Opening Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Closing Sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Opening Power Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Closing Power Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Opening The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Closing The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .103
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . . .103
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .106
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped . . . . . . . .118
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Key Fob
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66ft (20m)
using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
• This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
• The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
RUN will illuminate.
Key Fob
1 — Liftgate Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — PANIC Button
3
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Key Fob With Emergency Key
1 — Emergency Key
2 — Key Fob
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push the interior door unlock button on the door panel.
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
located in “Multimedia” for further programmable information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically
if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.
3
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Remove The Emergency Key
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
Battery Replacement
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, and then replace
the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
3
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The push button ignition has three operating positions. The
three positions are OFF, ACC, and RUN.
START/STOP Ignition Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
positions:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
NOTE: The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located
inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: For further information, refer to ⬙Starting Procedures,⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating.⬙
3
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle On Message
WARNING! (Continued)
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to
the chime, the Vehicle On message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: The power window switches and power sunroof (if
equipped) will remain active for three minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake,
place the engine in the OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
(Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328ft (100m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• The vehicle must be started with the key after two
consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
• Hazard switch off
How To Use Remote Start
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Push remote start button on the key fob twice within five
seconds. Pushing the remote start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, insert the key
in the ignition and turn to the ON/RUN position.
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Check engine light shall not be present
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an intrusion
3
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument
Cluster Display — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the key fob. However, the ignition must be cycled by
pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition
switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable with a one time push of the remote start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior
to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button is not
present, insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn
the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry feature, the ignition switch must be in
the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Insert Key and Turn To Run” will show in the
instrument cluster display until you insert the key.
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active
— Push Start Button” will will show in the instrument
cluster display until you push the START button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation
— If Equipped
When remote start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting remote start will resume
previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation will continue.
3
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key
fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is
used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
• The horn will pulse
• The turn signals will flash
• The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after approximately 90 seconds, and then the vehicle
security alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the “OFF”
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make sure
the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Place the vehicle ignition system in the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward until the lock indicator is shown. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the
first detent or rotate the door lock button until the lock
indicator is hidden. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the
door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden.
3
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock button is locked (lock indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go — Ignition the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Power Door Lock Switch
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the keys are
found inside the car when door lock button on trim is used
to lock the door. At the third attempt, the doors will lock
even if the key is inside
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in
ACC or ON/RUN and the driver’s door is open, the doors
will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside the
vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be
unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically.
3
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any passive entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release.
3
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into
liftgate handle release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5ft (1.5m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate
release to open with one fluid motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5m) of the
liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to the
right of liftgate handle release.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5ft
(1.5m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the Passive Entry lock button located on the outside door
handle.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect System,
the key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry key fob in Vehicle⬙ remains
active/functional.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a ChildProtection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
3
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the
door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden
(unlocked position), roll down the window, and open
the door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain
it is in the desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING! (Continued)
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar
is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
Front Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
3
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Seat Height Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s seat.
The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up,
down, forward or rearward.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
3
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Rear Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment — If
Equipped
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat
near the floor and release it when the seat is at the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
3
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper outer
edge of the seat or pull the pull strap located on the
middle outer edge of the seat.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
placing the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Recliner Adjustment
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. Pull on the pull strap while sitting in the rear seat
to recline the seatback.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of desired radio
station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains three buttons, a set (S) button to
activate the memory save function, memory button (1) and
memory button (2). The memory switch allows the driver
to recall either of the two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the appropriate number button on the
switch.
Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory switch.
Driver Memory Switch
3
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing
profile from memory.
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch, then push memory button (1) within five seconds. The instrument cluster display will display which
memory position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch, then push memory button (2) within five seconds. The instrument cluster display will display which
memory position is being set.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be programmed to
recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles with a
push of the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE: Before programming your key fob you must select
the “Memory To FOB” feature through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile (1) or (2).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two, push
memory button number 2 or the unlock button on the
key fob linked to memory position 2.
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds push and release the
button labeled (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster
display.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE: Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing
the unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the instrument cluster
display.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
memory button number 1 or the unlock button on the
key fob linked to memory position 1.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
3
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
• Press the heated seat button
heating elements off.
a third time to turn the
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
setting on.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting on.
a second time to turn
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING! (Continued)
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
the ventilated seat OFF.
a second time to
a third time to turn
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
3
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear
of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact, the RHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head
and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to
their normal position, see your authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
(Continued)
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions up,
mid and down. The center head restraint has only two
positions, up and down. When the center seat is being
occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there is no occupant in the center seat the head
restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the
driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go then push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
Center Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
WARNING!
Outboard Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time will vary based on environmental
temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
3
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
the heating element ON.
once to turn
• Press the heated steering wheel button
to turn the heating element OFF.
a second time
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
3
Electrochromic Mirror
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Electrochromic Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
NOTE: The automatic dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing.
The automatic dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen.
• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature
on.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Power Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
The power mirror switches are located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Power Mirror Switches
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Left And Right Mirror Select
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Power Folding Mirrors
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Folding Mirror Switch
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed
is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
3
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror
cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic
headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights —
if equipped.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
3
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The headlight delay feature is automatically activated if the customer leaves the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position when the ignition is place to the OFF
position.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the
ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine
is started and remain on unless the headlamps are turned
on, the parking brake is applied, or the engine is shut OFF.
NOTE: If allowed by law, in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights.
3
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instrument cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn
off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is
flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
NOTE:
INTERIOR LIGHTS
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved
to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the
LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove compartment light and the cargo light. To restore interior light
operation after automatic battery protection is enabled
(Lights Off), either place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position or cycle the light switch.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
console. Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch
on either side of the console. To turn the lights off, push the
switch a second time. These lights also turn on when a door
is opened, or when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned completely
upward to the second detent.
3
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
There are courtesy lights located above the front seats. The
courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the lens. To
turn the lights off, push the lens a second time.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted
cupholders — if equipped.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, door handle lights, under
I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear
wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in this section.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme
bottom (O) off position. The interior lights will remain off
when the doors are open.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
3
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION! (Continued)
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
(Continued)
Windshield Washer Operation
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position,
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn
off.
WARNING!
3
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping
cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Control
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF
position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper
operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other
inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
• Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
when the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and when the ambient temperature
is below 33° F (0.6° C).
3
• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When remote
start is active and the outside ambient temperature is
less than 33° F (0.6° C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
shall be enabled. On exiting remote start resume previous operation except, if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
timer and operation shall continue.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds
above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles
(first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Features
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a
switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed
while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position,
the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the lever is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
switch bank by the manual climate controls. Push
this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors. An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE:
• The Windshield Wiper De-Icer (if equipped) shall be
activated automatically when the Rear Defrost is turned
on and when the ambient temperature is below 33
degrees F (0.6° C).
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window
defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Without A Touchscreen
Overview
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be
set to obtain desired interior conditions.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Manual Climate Control Without A Touchscreen Descriptions
Icon
Description
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the off position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Modes Control Knob
Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
3
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Icon
Description
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and
side window demist outlets. When the defrost setting is selected, the blower level will increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
3
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Economy Mode
• Activation By Remote Start Operation
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate the
temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside ambient temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C) the windshield
wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the
climate control functions will resume their previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the de-icer timer and
operation will continue.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element located
at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions are met:
• Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold
weather manual start with full defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
• Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear
Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is below
33° F (0.6° C).
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen
3
5.0 With Manual Temperature Controls
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
8.4/8.4 NAV With Manual Temperature Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
3
5.0 With Automatic Temperature Controls
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
8.4/8.4 NAV With Automatic Temperature Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Climate Control With A Touchscreen Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
3
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator on the
touchscreen illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons — If Equipped
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow
button on the faceplate, on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the
red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the down arrow
button on the faceplate, on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is
active, the passenger’s temperature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Icon
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Description
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
3
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
3
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
NOTE:
Operating Tips
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the presence
of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be
manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Summer Operation
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause
window fogging.
3
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacation/Storage
Outside Air Intake
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter
the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Window Fogging
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Cabin Air Filter
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Operating Tips Chart
3
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the passenger
door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down, for a short period of time,
and release and the window will go down automatically.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down briefly and release it when you want the window to
stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of time, and
release and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first
detent and hold to close the window manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
3
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (the indicator light on
the button with turn on). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn back off).
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
The power shade switches are located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Window Lockout Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof
Power Shade Switches
Express
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
A comfort stop position and full open position are the
programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open positions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to
minimize wind buffeting.
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof will open automatically to the comfort
stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed position
when the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half open position prior to the sunroof
opening). Push the switch rearward and release it again,
3
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the sunroof will open to the full open position and automatically stop. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
Manual Mode
A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop
for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position
has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop
position (if the sunshade is in the closed position when the
operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open
to the half open position prior to the sunroof opening).
Push and hold the switch rearward again, the sunroof will
open to the full open position and automatically stop. Any
release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof
and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition
until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Opening Power Shade
Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position and
stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the shade
switch will stop the shade.
Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward. The
shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open
position. Push and hold the shade switch rearward again
and the shade will open automatically to the full-open
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely.
Manual
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the forward
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
3
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
HOOD
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Opening The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF/LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Hood Release
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety
latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety
latch release lever is located behind the front edge of the
hood, slightly off-center to the right.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
Closing The Hood
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from
the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the
hood is completely closed.
3
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry” located in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”)
or by pushing the liftgate button on the key fob. Push the
liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to
open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing
the button twice within five seconds a second time will
close the liftgate.
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. Push the
button on the key fob twice within five seconds to release
the liftgate.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
instrument cluster display, all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic release on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate
will unlock when you push the electronic release on the
liftgate. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the front overhead
console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be
closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear
trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in
motion, pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear
trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
Liftgate Entry
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
NOTE: Use the power door lock switch on either front
door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the
liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the
driver’s door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the
liftgate.
Closing
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over the
closing effort.
NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked.
NOTE: .
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the
liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate
trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the
liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power
liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside handle
release will lock the vehicle.
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release.
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg).
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this
section for further information.
3
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Extension Panels
WARNING! (Continued)
Cargo extension panels can be folded and unfolded. When
the rear seats are moved to the more forward positions and
the rear seat backs are folded down, the extension panels
can be unfolded manually by hand (2 of them). The
extension panels can be used to extend the load floor to the
rear seats and/or hide the gap between the load floor and
rear seats, or to assist in loading large items into the cargo
area.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
(Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle
on the sides of the load floor.
3
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Rear Storage Bins
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on the overhead console,
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE: It is NOT the button that is normally used to open
and close the door. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.⬙
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then
rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.⬙
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (NonRolling Code)
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button, while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
NOTE:
Using HomeLink
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
3
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
3
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passengers side of
the instrument panel. Pull outward on the latch to open the
glove compartment.
Glove Compartment
There is also an additional storage bin located above the
instrument panel in the center of the dash.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage Compartment
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located in the upper portion of the center console.
Refer to “Wireless Charging Pad-If Equipped” in this
section for more information.
Center Console
Upper Console Charging Pad
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell
phones, PDAs, and other small items.
Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the
front passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seat
cushion loop to open the storage compartment.
Center Console Storage
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Passenger Seat Cushion Loop
3
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into
position before using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will
not provide the proper stability for passengers. An
improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious
injury.
Front Cupholders
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers,
located in the center armrest.
3
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover
Rear Cupholders
Sun Visors
Power Outlets
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror
cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR knob
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on
the center stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet has
power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet Power Distribution Center panel fuse from fuse
location F91 to F81.
3
Rear Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F75 Fuse 20A Yellow Front Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter Console Bin
2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position)
3 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at all
times)
4 — F60 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end game consoles will exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device
is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
Power Inverter Location
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
3
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in
place and an LED indicator light.
NOTE: Visit UconnectPhone.com for supported mobile
phones and compatible aftermarket sleeves.
Wireless Charging Pad Operation
To use the wireless charging pad, the coil in your mobile
phone needs to align with the coil in the charging pad,
which is located directly under the Qi logo. Since each
mobile phone’s coil location is different, you may need a
few attempts to locate the correct spot for your mobile
phone:
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located inside the upper portion of the center console.
This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge your Qi
enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses magnetic
induction to transfer power to your mobile device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless
charging, be equipped with an aftermarket sleeve or
equipped with a back plate from your mobile phone
provider, or an online or local electronics retailer.
1. Place your mobile phone on the wireless charging pad,
towards the Qi logo, so that the LED turns red. If the
LED does not turn red, pick up the mobile phone and
change the location.
2. Once the LED transitions from red to flashing green,
your mobile phone is correctly placed and charging.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
Qi Logo Phone Alignment
Adjustable Finger Tabs
NOTE: The mobile phone must be aligned around the Qi
logo for the LED to transition from red to flashing green.
NOTE: The initial adjustment will only need to be done
once as long as only one mobile phone is used. If a different
mobile phone is used, the cradle will need to be readjusted.
3. If the LED does not transition from red to flashing green,
and just turns off, pick up your mobile phone and
reposition it on the charging pad.
4. Adjust the wireless charging pad mobile phone cradle to
hold the mobile phone in position. The cradle moves by
pushing down on the finger tabs and adjusting the
cradle in or out.
The LED indicator will flash green while the mobile phone
is charging. The Qi enabled phone is able to function
normally as it is charging.
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not place metal object(s) between the mobile phone
and wireless charging pad. Metal object(s) such as
coins, rings or keys will become very HOT. If metal
object(s) become lodged between the mobile phone
and wireless charging pad, carefully remove the mobile phone and allow the metal object(s) to cool before
removing. Failure to wait until the object(s) cool could
result in personal injury, including burns.
CAUTION!
Do not place your vehicle key fob on the wireless
charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature may not
work properly while a mobile phone is being charged.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed
on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and
luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Yellow Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Blue Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Green Telltale Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items . . . . . . .129
䡵 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ White Telltale Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .162
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
4
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
Base Instrument Cluster
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
4
Premium Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driverinteractive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Fuel Gauge
• The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
4
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display menu items consist of the
following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
Base Instrument Cluster Display
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start (If Equipped)
• Audio
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Messages
• Up Arrow Button
• Screen Setup
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward
through the main menu and submenus.
• Speed Warning
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and submenus.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of a main menu
item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of a main menu
item.
• OK Button
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — Left Arrow Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the OK button to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Oil Change Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
100%.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
4
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow
button to select the large or small digital speedometer
display. Push and release the OK button to toggle units
(mph or km/h) of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow
button to scroll through the information submenus and
push and release the OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus:
With the vehicle OFF and in the RUN position, hold the
OK button for one second for Storage Mode.
Push OK button to confirm vehicle storage. The instrument
cluster display will display a countdown from ten to zero.
NOTE: Pushing and releasing the left arrow button will
cancel Storage Mode. If the procedure is cancelled or there
is a fault, the procedure will need to be restarted from the
beginning.
1. After counting down, the instrument cluster display
will display the message: “Storage Mode Engaged To
Minimize Battery Drain.” Starting the vehicle will exit
Storage Mode.
Oil Temperature
NOTE: Storage mode will increase the amount the time the
vehicle can be parked without the battery discharging
beyond the point where the vehicle won’t restart. To use
the vehicle’s key fob, the driver will need to grab a door
handle to wake up the vehicle prior to it checking for the
presence of a valid key and unlocking the door.
Oil Pressure — Gasoline Vehicle Only
Driver Assist
Oil Life
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu title is displayed is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display.
Tire Pressure
Transmission Temperature
Battery Voltage
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
• Driver Override
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
• ACC Unavailable Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
• System Off
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that
need to be met. For further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
4
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to reset
average fuel economy feature.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip
A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the following:
• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi
or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in
the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles
(48 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display
will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
“LOW FUEL” message and a new Range value will
display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
• Average – The display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.
• Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km) form while driving.
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) of Trip A or Trip B
since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button to display
the Stop/Start status.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Audio
Upper Left
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio
menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
• None
Stored Messages
• Outside Temp
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button
will allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen
as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
• Compass (default setting)
• Time
• Range
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Outside Temp (default setting)
Gear Display
• Time
• Full (default setting)
• Range
• Single
• Fuel Economy Average
4
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Fuel Economy Current
• Audio (show/hide)
• Trip A
• Messages
• Trip B
• Screen Setup
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
• Speed Warning (show/hide)
• Cancel
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press OK
button to choose show or hide this menu on the instrument
cluster display.
• Restore
Current Gear
• On
• Off (default setting)
Favorite Menus — Equipped
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Terrain (show/hide)
• Driver Assist (show/hide)
• Fuel Economy (show/hide)
• Trip Info (show/hide)
• Stop/Start
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on vehicles with manual shifting mode. The GSI provides the
driver with a visual indication within the instrument
cluster display when the recommended gear shift point has
been reached. This indication notifies the driver that
changing gears will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.
When the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the
GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
The GSI indicator in the instrument cluster display remains
illuminated until the driver changes gear, or the driving
conditions return to a situation where changing gear is not
required to improve fuel consumption.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Speed Warning Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button
to enter speed warning. Use the up or down arrow button
to select a desired speed, then push and release the OK
button to set the speed. The Speed Warning telltale will
display in the instrument cluster display, and a chime will
sound with a pop up warning message when the set speed
is exceeded.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Warning And Indicator
Lights And Messages” located in ”Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
consoles and similar devices.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
4
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s or passenger seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
English
Metric
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle under power, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine vehicle under power, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
4
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Lights
Engine Malfunction Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come
on when placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position. It should go out when the engine is running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in
the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON, even
if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
NOTE: This telltale indicates that an ESC event is active.
4
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
CAUTION!
4
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and remain on
until fuel is added.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service
is required.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Forward Collision Warning Off Warning (FCW) Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
4
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) System Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information,
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
4WD Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased
torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information on fourwheel drive operation and proper use.
4
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service 4WD Indicator Light
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and
have the vehicle serviced immediately.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and is in
a lane departure situation.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see
your authorized dealer.
Blue Telltale Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
4
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Lights
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Turn Signal Warning Lights
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as selected, as
well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
4
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Speed Control is SET. Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and the target vehicle is detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and there is no target vehicle
detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙
for further information.
4
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left or
right lane marking has been detected. When both lanes are detected the telltale will light up
green, and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp will
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Selec Speed Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Selec Speed Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when “Selec Speed Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the vehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and push
the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE: If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
4
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been
turned on and in the READY state. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices” and
“Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access”
in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
4
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . .211
▫ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .181
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . .192
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . .198
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
5
166 SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
167
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
5
168 SAFETY
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
(Continued)
169
WARNING! (Continued)
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
5
170 SAFETY
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
SAFETY
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
171
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
(Continued)
5
172 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to return
to ESC On.
SAFETY
NOTE:
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
173
NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
“Full Off” can only be achieved in Track Mode if so equipped.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if so
equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
(Continued)
5
174 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
SAFETY
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
175
WARNING! (Continued)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
(Continued)
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
5
176 SAFETY
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to
help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers sensitivity
and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
HDC has three states:
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and
Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
SAFETY
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Enabling HDC
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• Driver door is closed.
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
Activating HDC
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed
for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate
177
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
5
178 SAFETY
Driver Override
• Driver door opens.
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
Deactivating HDC
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,
is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
SAFETY
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
179
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• Driver is not applying throttle.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
Activating SSC
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
engine torque and brakes.
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the
following conditions are met:
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).
• Driver releases throttle.
• Driver releases brake.
• Transmission is in any selection other than P.
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
5
180 SAFETY
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC
set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and the
level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of
grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
NOTE:
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. While actively controlling SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected
set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
Deactivating SSC
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
SAFETY
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch
has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the
state SSC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
181
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC
switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
5
182 SAFETY
sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both
• The BSM system detection zone does NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.)
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
SAFETY
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
183
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
5
Side Monitoring
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
184 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
SAFETY
185
5
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
186 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
RCP Detection Zones
SAFETY
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
187
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
5
188 SAFETY
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Blind Spot Alert Off
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
— If Equipped
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
SAFETY
189
If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
5
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
190 SAFETY
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Forward Collision Button
To turn the FCW system off, push the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
Turning FCW On Or Off
To turn the FCW system back on, push the forward
collision button again to turn the system on (LED turns
off).
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
• Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near warns
the driver later.
SAFETY
• Changing the Active Braking status to “off” prevents the
system from providing limited active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
key cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away and it applies limited
braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you when you are much closer. This setting
191
provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
5
192 SAFETY
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
SAFETY
The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15.5 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
193
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
5
194 SAFETY
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire pressure monitoring telltale light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color.
SAFETY
195
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
5
196 SAFETY
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size
Spare
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does
not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a different color
pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.
SAFETY
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “Service
Tire Pressure System” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or
non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
197
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 10 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the ⬙TPM Telltale Light⬙ will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the ⬙TPM
Telltale Light⬙ will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values
5
198 SAFETY
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
General Information
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
• Seat Belt Systems
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Child Restraints
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
SAFETY
199
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints”).
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should be
secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear
seat.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
Need Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
5
200 SAFETY
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
SAFETY
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
201
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
5
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
(Continued)
202 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
203
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
5
204 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Positioning The Lap Belt
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
SAFETY
205
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
5
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
206 SAFETY
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
207
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
5
208 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) (If
Equipped)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
SAFETY
209
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The table below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
5
210 SAFETY
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
211
Air Bag System Components
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Air Bags Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Occupant Classification System
5
212 SAFETY
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
SAFETY
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which
could affect the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the
fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to
alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has
come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
213
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light, refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights
And Messages” in “Getting to Know Your Instrument
Panel” section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
5
214 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster
4 — Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag/Passenger Knee Impact
Bolster
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags
(Continued)
Driver and Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed to
provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as determined
by the OCS.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
215
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
5
216 SAFETY
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on
the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
SAFETY
operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger
to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light
objects on it; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Rear-facing child restraint
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat*
Properly seated adult
Unoccupied seat
217
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Full-power
deployment
OR reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
5
218 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
SAFETY
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight
on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
219
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to
face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and
center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger’s seated weight.
5
220 SAFETY
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY
221
5
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
222 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
in the instrument panel
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the
seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly,
or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs
service for any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
SAFETY
223
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
Knee Impact Bolsters
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air
Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air
bags.
5
224 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover (front seats) and the seam
on the outboard side of the seat cushion’s trim cover
(outboard rear seats — if equipped with rear SABs). The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a
very high speed and with such a high force that it could
injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SABs; the performance could be
adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into
you, causing serious injury.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SAFETY
225
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
5
226 SAFETY
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
SAFETY
227
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the
vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A
slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing
event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the
Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
5
228 SAFETY
• Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Air Bags Sensors
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
SAFETY
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
229
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
5
230 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
(Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
SAFETY
• These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
231
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
5
232 SAFETY
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-indexparents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
NOTE:
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
233
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
5
234 SAFETY
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
SAFETY
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
235
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
5
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
236 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
Second Row LATCH Positions
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
237
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
weight + weight of the child recombined weight of the child and the child
straint) for using the LATCH anchorrestraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
age system to attach the child reand tether anchor instead of the LATCH sysstraint?
tem once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
seat belt be used together to attach a
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
or more child restraints. If the center position
using a common lower LATCH anchorage?
does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
touch the back of the front passenger
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacseat?
turer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
All rear head restraints may be removed.
5
238 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
SAFETY
239
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and
E are used for the left outboard position behind the driver
(3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH–
compatible position in your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you can fit three child restraints
in your vehicle, you must use the seatbelt to install the
center child restraint and you must use the LATCH anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You can use either
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing
the third child seat in position (1) behind the front passenger.
5
LATCH Positions
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and
buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint an
occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating
240 SAFETY
position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, C and D.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite
door, E. Do not use the remaining left outboard seating
position (3) for any occupant. The center child restraint
will block the seat belt buckle for this position.
WARNING!
• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCHcompatible child restraint in the center seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left
outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this
seat for another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
• If you are installing three child restraints next to each
other, you must use the seat belt and the center tether
anchor for the center position. You must use the
LATCH anchors to install the child seat in position
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
(3), behind the driver. You may use either the LATCH
anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing the
child seat in position (1), behind the front passenger.
Please refer to “Installing the LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
SAFETY
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
241
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
5
242 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
SAFETY
243
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward
recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is alseat?
lowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
All rear head restraints may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an ALR retracpath of the child restraint?
tor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
5
244 SAFETY
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
245
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
5
246 SAFETY
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Tether Anchorage Locations
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
247
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips since vehicle equipped with a gas
engine the following applies:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
5
248 SAFETY
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Defroster
Seat Belts
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the
blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the
air directed against the windshield. See your authorized
dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
SAFETY
WARNING!
249
WARNING! (Continued)
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat using
• ALWAYS securely attach
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor
mat upside down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
before installing any
FROM THE VEHICLE
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
(Continued)
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
5
250 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine. . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Extended Park Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .257
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .258
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Electric Park Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .264
▫ 1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ 2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4x4) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 POWER STEERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . .279
6
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ To Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . .281
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .282
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .283
▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . .288
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . .288
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . .293
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . .297
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . .300
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .303
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense. . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .311
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .312
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . . .324
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .325
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
6
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .370
▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings). . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
䡵 DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pushing the accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition to the START mode and release when the
engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds:
1. Place the ignition in the LOCK/OFF mode
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition in the START mode and release it as the
starter engages. The starter motor will automatically disengage itself once engine is running. If the engine fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
6
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the
ignition to the OFF position, wait five seconds to allow
the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the driver’s
side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are
available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5
Amps to activate the heater element.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
WARNING!
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s
side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
6
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
PARKING BRAKE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be
certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
You can engage the park brake in two ways:
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect settings.
The park brake switch is located in the center console.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
NOTE: The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released or
applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing
the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake
will automatically engage whenever the transmission is
placed into PARK, when the ignition is turned OFF. If your
foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement while the park brake is engaging.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages. Once
the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE telltale light in
the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
apply the park brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE
telltale light will not illuminate, however, it can only be
released when the ignition is in the ON/RUN mode.
The park brake will release automatically when the ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, the
driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is made to drive
away.
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN mode. Put your foot on the brake
pedal, then push the park brake switch down momentarily.
You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may also
notice a small amount of movement in the brake pedal.
Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The BRAKE
telltale light in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
6
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
telltale light will illuminate, and a continuous chime will
sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete
stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will
remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be sure
the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving;
failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light flashing.
In this event, urgent service of the electric park brake
system is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to
hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, whenever
the ignition is turned “OFF”. Auto Park Brake is enabled
and disabled by customer selection through the customer
programmable features section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed by
pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the
transmission is placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if the
vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition is in RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the park brake will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is at a standstill.
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
6
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open.
Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again
once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition
is turned to the OFF position and back to ON again.
• The park brake must be unapplied.
Brake Service Mode
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the park brake system to normal
operation:
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You
should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this can
only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily
by entering the Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect
Settings in your vehicle. This menu based system will
guide you through the steps necessary to retract the EPB
actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and
remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, (or, with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode) the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
6
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to
the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some
vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3,
etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access
to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
6
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for further information). Moving the
gear selector into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the DRIVE
position) activates ERS mode, displays the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and prevents automatic upshifts
beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the highest available gear.
Gear Selector
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
When exiting the vehicle, always:
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
• Apply the parking brake.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
• Turn the engine OFF.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the
ignition is in the OFF mode), the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
6
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation⬙ in this section for further information) to select
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission
cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the note within the
“Torque Converter Clutch” topic in this section). Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to
make full use of available engine power.
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the
center console. Refer to ⬙Selec-Terrain⬙ in this section for
further information.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
6
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
you set the transmission gear limit to 5 (fifth gear), the
transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift
through the lower gears normally.
1. Stop the vehicle.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
Moving the gear selector to the ERS position (beside
DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available
gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the gear selector forward
(-) or rearward (+) will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear selector into
the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward (-).
The transmission will shift to the range from which the
vehicle can best be slowed down.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If Equipped
This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive (4X4).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel
traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear
wheels.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles [2
to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
1-Speed 4X4 Switch
6
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4x4) — If Equipped
2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal
driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three
selectable mode positions:
• 4WD LOW
• REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
• NEUTRAL
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW range
position can be used to provide an additional gear reduction which allows for increased torque to be delivered to
both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is intended for
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in 4WD LOW on
dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the normal
driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. It
is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer
to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an
additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for further
information on the various positions and their intended
usages.
6
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedures
Shifting Into 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition in the ON mode and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW”
button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid
when the shift is complete.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will flash from the instrument cluster display with
instructions on how to complete the requested shift. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition in the ON mode and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW”
button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will
flash from the instrument cluster display with instructions on how to complete the requested shift. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Selec-Terrain Switch
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
(0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow the shift.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete.
6
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Neutral Button
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Release the parking brake.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
Activating The Rear E-Locker
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following conditions must be met:
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
13. Apply the parking brake.
2. The ignition in the ON mode and the engine running.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key kob.
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH (24 km/h).
Repeat steps 1-7 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
NOTE: When towing this vehicle behind another vehicle,
the Mopar flat tow wiring kit must be used, and the
parking brake must be released. Refer to ⬙Recreational
Towing⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙ for further instructions.
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System — If
Equipped
The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking
rear differential to provide better traction in the 4WD LOW
position. The “REAR LOCK” button is on the Selec-Terrain
Knob.
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR LOCK button
once.
Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System
To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
conditions must be met:
1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK
indicator light on.
2. The ignition in the ON mode and the engine running.
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR LOCK
button once.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
NOTE:
flash from the instrument cluster display with instructions on how to complete the requested shift.
• It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back
and forth to complete engagement and disengagement
of the E-Locker.
SELEC-TERRAIN
• When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in the
instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button will
begin to flash. When the shift is complete the REAR
LOCK indicator lights will remain on.
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best
performance for all terrains.
• When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in
the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button
will begin to flash. When the shift is complete the REAR
LOCK indicator lights will remain off.
Description
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.
• Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling, below
15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right and left
steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to align.
• The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to
taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD LOW
shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will
Selec-Terrain Switch
6
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec-Terrain offers the following modes:
• Auto — Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances traction
with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles.
• Rock — Off-road calibration only available in 4WD
LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved steerability for use on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for
low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
• Snow — Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may use
second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to
minimize wheel slippage.
• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
with the Off-Road package.
• Sport — This mode alters the transmission’s automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are
increased to make full use of available engine power.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
NOTE: SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is
selected.
• Sand/Mud — Off-road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass. Driveline
is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on
less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are
set to limit traction control management of throttle and
wheel spin.
• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control
for steep downhill control. See “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information.
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you
will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster display
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the
dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster display screen, it
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
pedal will automatically restart the engine.
6
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Mode
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine
will not stop:
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable
cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward or reverse gear.
• Hood is open.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure with
vehicle in DRIVE position.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
• 5 mph threshold not achieved from previous AUTOSTOP.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times
without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
except in the PARK position.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
6
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
• The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released.
• The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled.
• The engine hood has been opened.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off, the
engine may require a manual restart and the electric park
brake may require a manual release (depress brake pedal
and push Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
STOP/START OFF Switch
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
Instrument Cluster Display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
6
Speed Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
On/Off
SET+/Accel
RES/Resume
SET-/Decel
CANC/Cancel
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
To Accelerate For Passing
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET - button.
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Resume Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
6
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Deactivate
NOTE:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC/Cancel
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition switch
off erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving within 3
minutes the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
6
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
• When the driver door is open at low speed.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speed.
• ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
+ button or the SET - button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.”
6
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
if:
• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button.
• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
• You turn the ignition to the OFF position.
WARNING! (Continued)
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will show the last set
speed.
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
WARNING!
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
(Continued)
6
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
NOTE:
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET - button.
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of
the vehicle.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the
ACC to the existing set speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting appears in the instrument cluster display.
6
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system will adjust the
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster display will show the “Sensed
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
6
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with stop system will cancel and the brakes will ramp-out.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
Brake Alert
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
While ACC with stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC with stop system will cancel and the
brakes will ramp-out. Driver intervention will be required
at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Display Warnings And Maintenance
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will appear in the instrument
cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
6
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
6
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Turns And Bends
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
6
ACC Hill Example
Turn Or Bend Example
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Changing
Narrow Vehicles
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Speed
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
6
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will
appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn
on when the speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
6
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
6
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster
display will show the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
6
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150(120120 cm)
100 cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in
(200150 cm)
None
None
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime
None
6th Solid
None
None
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Arcs — Left
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
None
None
1st Flashing
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will show the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
6
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show a “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to appear in the instrument cluster display.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An open
liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your
vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the
vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released
when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
6
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the
system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in the
rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active Park
Assist System⬙ section for further information.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47
inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
6
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
6
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150(120120 cm)
100 cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in
(200150 cm)
None
None
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime
None
6th Solid
None
None
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Arcs — Left
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
None
None
1st Flashing
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
1st Flashing
6
1st Flashing
Continuous
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast
sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
No Tone/Solid Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
6
No Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs — Center
Arcs — Right
Audible Alert
Chime
Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
None
None
None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
None
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
None
None
None
None
No
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
No
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume settings
will not be accessible from the instrument cluster display.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
6
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a
faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” for further information.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
6
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to appear in the instrument cluster display.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking
maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver selection, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches
the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
and the driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealer must have at least 30 miles
(48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately.
This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration
6
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
to improve the performance of the feature. The system
will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle
calibration to account for differences such as over or
under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns
on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns
off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering guidance into the parking space.
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
• Driver’s door is opened.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
• Rear liftgate is opened.
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following conditions are present:
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear
fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
• Driver’s door is closed.
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to
Perpendicular” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if
you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting.
• Rear liftgate is closed.
NOTE:
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• Gear position is in DRIVE.
• Ignition is in the RUN position.
• ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven
above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
6
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
Active ParkSense Searching
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
6
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
6
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
6
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
6
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the
maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position⬙
message will be momentarily displayed.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled, the
“Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message will show in the instrument cluster display.
Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch to
change your parking space setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to
Parallel” message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Active ParkSense Searching Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking
sequence.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
6
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
6
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
6
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
6
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel, as well
as a visual warning in the instrument cluster display, to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible and visual
warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not
detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
6
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is “off”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect display.
Lane Sense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system off (LED turns on).
LaneSense Warning Button
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button to turn the system on (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state, on or off, from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
3.5 Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
6
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick
Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn solid
white. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green
to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
7.0 Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
6
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
6
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK
or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
6
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforcement.
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located on the
driver’s side door trim).
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
NOTE:
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door
using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler cap.
• Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) will come on. Be sure the gas cap
is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel filler
cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap
can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• If fuel is spilled on surface on the paint, clear it
immediately to avoid damage the paint.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
6
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Tire Size
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
6
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.
Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
6
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission
Model
Frontal Area
2.4L/Automatic with
or without Trailer
Tow Package
3.2L/Automatic
3.2L/Automatic with
Trailer Tow Package
FWD or 4WD
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
FWD or 4WD
FWD or 4WD
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Maximum Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
200 lbs (90 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
39.44 sq ft
4,500 lbs (2 041 kg)
450 lbs (204 kg)
(3.66 sq m)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
6
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
(Continued)
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
6
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
6
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
Highway Driving
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Reduce speed.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
6
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
4X4 Models
Flat Tow
Wheels
OFF
the
Ground
NONE
Dolly Tow
Front
OK
Rear
NOT
ALLOWED
OK
Towing
Condition
On Trailer
ALL
Front-Wheel
Drive (FWD)
Models
1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
OK
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
See Instructions:
• Before towing, see your authorized dealer for the
Mopar flat tow wiring kit
• It is recommended to charge the battery of the towed
vehicle during recreational towing
• Transmission in PARK
• Power transfer unit in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
4X4 Models
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF
the
Ground
Front-Wheel
Drive (FWD)
Models
1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable
features in the Uconnect Settings.
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place automatic transmission
in PARK, or manual transmission in gear. Turn the
engine OFF.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the parking brake.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and release
the brake pedal.
6
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Towing with the front wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not
have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer unit.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
The power transfer unit must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N) and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to
the 4WD selector switch. Shifts into and out of NEUTRAL
(N) can take place with the selector switch in any mode
position.
CAUTION!
• Failure to use the proper Mopar wiring kit to power
the steering system during recreational towing may
damage the vehicle’s steering system and/or other
vehicle components.
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or power transfer
unit damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the power
transfer unit.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to shift the 4WD system into
NEUTRAL (N).
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N)
before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
(Continued)
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
9. Release the parking brake.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the
selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the N
symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
13. Apply the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not
start the engine.
17. Press and hold the brake pedal.
18. Release the parking brake.
Neutral Button
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
19. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and release
the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or until
the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for one second.
6
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
Neutral Button
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated
by the selector switch.
NOTE: When shifting the power transfer unit out of
NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid
gear clash.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
16. Re-enable the Auto Park Brake feature, if desired.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in offroad conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
there are a number of precautions that must be considered
before entering the water:
NOTE: When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as a
precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through
water may cause damage that may not be covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through
water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed
with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave
effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water,
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
6
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 16 inches
(40.5 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water deeper
than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to
minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48
cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer
Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky,
foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon
as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-Wheel
Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
NOTE: Brakes should be applied at increased slippage, but
before coming to a stop to avoid digging into the loose
surface and rendering the operator of the vehicle stuck/
immobile.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Once stopped, shift to
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed.
If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply
them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill,
ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning
the front wheels slowly left and right. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and may provide traction to
complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System
to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent Control if
equipped (refer to ⬙Safety Features⬙ in the “Safety” section
for further information). Let the vehicle go slowly down
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can
cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
6
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking system
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking
performance. Full braking power may not be available
to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the
braking components as soon as possible.
• Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance. Freeing
the wheels of impacted material will likely rectify imbalance condition
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .383
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 ASSIST AND 9–1–1 MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . .383
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .415
▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .418
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Interior Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . .405
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
7
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ 4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit . .431
▫ 4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit . .431
▫ Recovery Strap — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .433
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
ASSIST AND 9–1–1 MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower
center area of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
7
Assist And 9–1–1 Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
9-1-1 button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
9-1-1 Call
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable
if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are
connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for
Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system
initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call
connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1
operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system will attempt to remain connected with the
9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the
connection.
(Continued)
7
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X(voice/
data) or 3G(data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network connection and a GPS signal is required for the
9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
7
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Cargo Lamp
Overhead Console Lamp
Reading Lamp
Bulb Number
TL212–2
PLW214–2A
WL212–2
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps
Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps
Rear Turn Signal Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Back-Up Lamps
License Plate Lamp
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
Bulb Number
9005HL +
D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
WY21W
PSX24W
LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
WY21W
LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
W16W or 921
W5W
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
(Continued)
7
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Remove the three hex head screws from the wheel liner.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to gain
access to the headlamp bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate
clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Install the three hex head screws into the wheel liner.
Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker Lamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the upper lamp
assembly on the passenger side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then remove the bulb and socket
assembly from the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing if removed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove the three hex head screws from the wheel liner.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the wheel liner towards the tire
to gain access to the bulb.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
4. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
2. Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamp housing to
the vehicle.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
housing.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog
lamp housing until it locks in place.
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws.
10. Close the liftgate.
Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposing the trim
panel.
7
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver, open the
trim panel exposing the back of the liftgate lamp.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
lamp.
7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim.
11. Close the liftgate.
License Plate Lamp
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking tab
on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the
lamp assembly for removal.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp
assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
When a device does not work, you must check the electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
7
Blade Fuses
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
Power Distribution Center
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F06
F07
Blade Fuse
–
15 Amp Blue
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
F08
25 Amp Clear
–
F09
F10
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
F11
F12
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
F13
10 Amp Red
–
F14
10 Amp Red
–
F15
–
–
Description
Not Used
Powertrain Control Module
- PCM (Diesel Only)
Engine Control Module
(ECM)/Fuel Injection
Not Used
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
— If Equipped
Not Used
Brake Vacuum Pump — If
Equipped
Engine Control Module
(ECM)
Drivetrain Control Module
(DTCM)/Power Take-Off
Unit (PTU)/Brake System
Module (BSM) — If
Equipped/Brake Pedal
Switch/Back Up Switch
(Diesel Only)
Not Used
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395
Cavity
F16
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
–
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
5 Amp Tan
70 Amp Tan
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
F23
50 Amp Red
–
F24
20 Amp Yellow
–
F25B
20 Amp Yellow
–
F26
F27
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
Description
Ign Coil (Gas)/Engine Sensor (Diesel)
Not Used
Not Used
Starter Solenoid
A/C Compressor Clutch
Not Used
Radiator Fan
Body Controller Module
(BCM) — Feed 2
Voltage Stability Module
(VSM) Feed #2 — If
Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
Rear Wiper — If Equipped
With Stop/Start Engine
Option
Front Washer — If
Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
Fuel Heater - Diesel Only
Not Used
7
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F28
Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
Cartridge Fuse
–
F29
F30
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
60 Amp Yellow
F39
F40
–
–
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
F40
–
30 Amp Pink
F41
–
60 Amp Yellow
Description
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Not Used
Engine Control Module
(ECM)/(EPS)/(PCM)
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Glow Plugs (Diesel Only)
— If Equipped
HVAC Blower Motor
Trailer Tow Park Light — If
Equipped
Headlamp Washer Pump
— If Equipped
Body Controller Module
(BCM) — Feed 1
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397
Cavity
F41
Blade Fuse
–
Cartridge Fuse
50 Amp Red
F42
–
30 Amp Pink
F43
F44
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
30 Amp Pink
F45
–
30 Amp Pink
F46
F48
–
–
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
F49
–
30 Amp Pink
F50
–
30 Amp Pink
F51
F52
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
Description
Voltage Stability Module Feed 1 — If Equipped With
Stop/Start Engine Option
Trailer Tow Electric Brake
Module — If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Trailer Tow / 7-Way Connector — If Equipped
Passenger Door Module
(PDM) — If Equipped
Sunroof — If Equipped
Driver Door Module — If
Equipped
Power Inverter (115V A/C)
— If Equipped
Power Liftgate — If
Equipped
Not Used
Front Wipers — If
Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
7
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F53
Blade Fuse
–
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
F54
–
30 Amp Pink
F55
10 Amp Red
–
F56
15 Amp Blue
–
F57
20 Amp Yellow
–
F58
10 Amp Red
–
F59
–
30 Amp Pink
F60
20 Amp Yellow
–
Description
Brake System Module &
Valves
Body Control Module
(BCM) Feed 3
Blind Spot Sensors/
Compass/Rearview
Camera/Trunk Lamp With
Flashlamp Charger — If
Equipped
Ignition Node Module
(IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/
Electric Steering Column
Lock (ESL)
Trailer Tow Lights Left —
If Equipped
Occupant Classification
Module/VSM/ESC
Drivetrain Control Module
(DTCM) — If Equipped
Power Outlet - Center Console
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399
Cavity
F61
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
–
F62
20 Amp Yellow
–
F63
20 Amp Yellow
–
F64
20 Amp Yellow
–
F65
10 Amp Red
–
F66
15 Amp Blue
–
F67
10 Amp Red
–
Description
Trailer Tow Lights Right —
If Equipped
Windshield De-Icer — If
Equipped
Front Heated/Vented Seats
— If Equipped
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped
In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Driver Assist System Module (DASM)/Park Assist
(PAM) — If Equipped With
Stop/Start option
HVAC (ECC)/Instrument
Panel Cluster (IPC)
In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Driver Assist System Module (DASM)/Park Assist
(PAM) — If Not Equipped
With Stop/Start Option
7
400 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F68
F69
Blade Fuse
–
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
69A
10 Amp Red
–
F70
5 Amp Tan
–
F71
20 Amp Yellow
–
F72
10 Amp Red
–
F73
–
20 Amp Blue
F74
F75
–
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
–
Description
Not Used
Power Transfer Unit Switch
(TSBM)/Active Grill Shutter (AGS) — If Equipped
With Gas Engine
Power Transfer Unit Switch
(TSBM) — If Equipped
With Diesel Engine
Intelligent Battery Sensor
— If Equipped With Stop/
Start Engine Option
HID Headlamp Right — If
Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
Heated Mirrors — If
Equipped
Trailer Tow Back Up — If
Equipped
Rear Defroster
Cigar Lighter — If
Equipped
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401
Cavity
F76
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
–
F77
10 Amp Red
–
F78
10 Amp Red
–
F79
10 Amp Red
–
F80
F81
F82
F83
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Blue
F84
–
30 Amp Pink
F85
F86
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
Description
Rear Differential Module
(RDM) — If Equipped
Fuel Door Release/Brake
Pedal Switch
Diagnostic Port/Digital TV
(Japan Only)
Integrated Center Stack
(ICS)/HVAC/Aux Switch
Bank Module (ASBM)/
Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC)
Radio / CD — If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
Engine Controller Module
(Gas)
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
— Left
Not Used
Horns — If Equipped With
Stop/Start Engine Option
7
402 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F87A
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
–
F88
15 Amp Blue
–
F89
10 Amp Red
–
F90
F91
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
F92
F93
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
F94
–
30 Amp Pink
Description
HID Headlamp Left — If
Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
Collision Mitigation Module (CMM)/
Electrochromatic Mirror/
Smart Camera Module —
If Equipped
Headlamp Leveling — If
Equipped
Not Used
Power Outlet Rear — If
Equipped — Customer Selectable
Not Used
Brake System Module
(BSM) — Pump Motor
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
— Right
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 403
Cavity
F95
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
–
F96
10 Amp Red
–
F97
10 Amp Red
–
F98
25 Amp Clear
–
F99
F100
–
–
–
–
Description
Electrochromatic Mirror/
Rain Sensor/Sunroof — If
Equipped/Passenger Window Switch/Power Outlet
Console/Digital TV (Japan
Only)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag)
Audio Amplifier — If
Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
7
404 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the Body Control
Module (BCM) in the passenger compartment on the left
side dash panel under the instrument panel.
Cavity
F13
F32
F36
F38
F43
F48
F49
F50
F51
F53
F89
F91
F92
F93
Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
10 Amp Red
7.5 Amp Brown
10 Amp Red
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
10 Amp Red
Description
Low Beam Left
Interior Lighting
Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped
Deadbolt All Unlock
Washer Pump Front
Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right – If Equipped
Lumbar Support
Wireless Charging Pad – If Equipped
Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors – If Equipped
UCI Port (USB & AUX)
Door Locks – Driver Unlock
Fog Lamp Front Left
Fog Lamp Front Right
Low Beam Right
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 405
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under the
load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
7
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the hook from the stowed position on the back
side of the load floor and place the hook over the top
body flange and weather seal. This will hold the load
floor up while obtaining the jack and spare tire.
406 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
Jack And Tool Assembly
Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
5. Remove the chocks.
6. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove the
wrench from the jack assembly.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with
two attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded, the tension between the two attachment points
holds the jack handle in place.
7. Remove the spare tire.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 407
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
7
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the transmission
in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
408 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap
covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry
the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 409
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.
7
Rear Jacking Location
Jacking Locations
410 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Engagement Point
Front Jacking Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 411
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and
thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting
the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
7
Front Jacking Engagement Point
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
412 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Servicing and Maintenance” for additional warnings, cautions, and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”
for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
Assembled Jack
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 413
12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end
of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for
the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or service station.
7
414 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel chocks.
Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided. Release the parking brake before
driving the vehicle.
Tire Service Kit Storage
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind
the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Load Floor Handle
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 415
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the
bottom side of the Tire Service
Kit)
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn
on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button
(4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
7
416 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 417
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
(Continued)
7
418 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve
stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 419
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (6):
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
7
420 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to
Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 421
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle
(1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it
accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
7
422 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jumpstarting can be dangerous if done improperly so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive
battery post.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 423
WARNING! (Continued)
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
7
424 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 425
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove access door located on right interior trim panel
for release cable with the tip of your key.
CAUTION!
7
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Fuel Door Release Location
426 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up to release the
fuel filler door.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
Fuel Door Released
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 427
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the
gear selector override access hole (at the right front
corner of the gear selector assembly), and push and hold
the override release lever down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE,
while gently pressing the accelerator.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate
the shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center
console.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must push the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
7
428 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
NOTE: Push the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial
Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System” in “Safety” for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/ 2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 429
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
the “Starting And Operating” section.
4X4 MODELS
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF
The Ground
FWD
MODELS
NONE
NOT
ALLOWED
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST
METHOD
Front
ALL
1–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
NOT ALLOWED
2–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
7
NOT ALLOWED
See instructions under
“Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Power Transfer Unit in
NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
430 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is engaged,
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode. Note that the Safehold feature
will engage the Electric Park Brake whenever the driver’s
door is opened (if the ignition is ON, transmission is not in
PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are towing this
vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must
manually disable the Electric Park Brake each time the
driver’s door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and
then releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK so
that the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 431
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains
released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or
with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a
towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit
The manufacturer recommends towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or
with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on
a towing dolly.
7
432 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with a 2–speed Power Transfer Unit may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), under the following conditions:
Recovery Strap — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap.
Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow straps,
chains, or winch cables.
• The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N).
• The transmission must be in PARK.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Recovery straps should only be used in emergencies to
rescue stranded vehicles. Only use Recovery straps on
vehicles that fit within the recommended GVW of your
recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps to OE
recommended anchor points or emergency towing anchor points. Never attach to tow ball or vehicle tie
down point, these are not designed for this purpose.
Never attach to vehicle steering, drive train, or any
other suspension components. NEVER pull a strap
over sharp edges or abrasive surfaces that can damage
the recovery strap. NEVER use a damaged strap, it has
reduced strength. DO NOT attempt to repair straps.
ONLY persons involved in the recovery should be in
either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone inside the vehicles can be struck by strap recoil, causing serious
injury. MOVE bystanders at least 40 ft (12.2 m) from
the recovery area when using the recovery strap.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 433
Using Recovery Strap
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
1. Review all warnings and instructions first.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
2. Position the recovery vehicle.
3. Connect the recovery strap.
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.
5. Clear the danger zone.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6. Safely and slowly start pulling.
7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both vehicle are
secure and parked.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Maintenance Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ 2.4L Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ 3.2L Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
䡵 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
8
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . . .492
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
䡵 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Leather Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
8
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Maintenance Plan
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if necessary.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
Replace spark plugs **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.4L Compartment
8
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Oil Fill Cap
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Battery
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Air Cleaner Filter
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.2L Compartment
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Oil Filter Access Cover
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Battery
6
7
8
9
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Air Cleaner Filter
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield and rear window washers share the same
fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front of
the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in
the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
8
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
(Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Gasoline Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
8
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.2L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or
Shell Helix is recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature starting and
vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows
the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
“Engine Compartment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you
find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change
your air cleaner filter.
8
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner cover.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose (If Equipped)
3 — Screws
2. Push in on the quick connect clip with your thumb and
remove by pulling hose (If Equipped) away from air
cleaner filter cover.
Air Cleaner Air Hose — If Equipped
1 — Air Filter Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Hose (If Equipped)
3 — Quick Connect Clip
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
8
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
WARNING! (Continued)
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner cover to the
housing assembly and install air hose (if equipped).
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
(Continued)
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
8
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on
the lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
8
Console Closeout Panel
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash
panel
Air Filter Cover Location
Hush Panel
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the
top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door
out and lift up.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicators.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
panel and console closeout.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
8
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
• Wear or uneven edges
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
• Foreign material
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding
the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.
8
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper
blade from the wiper arm).
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade
side of the wiper facing up and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the
wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it
into its locked position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm
with your right hand. With your left hand hold the
wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper
blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
8
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the
end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper
arm with one hand, and apply pressure on the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Arm Receptacle
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
8
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Engine Coolant Checks
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
(Continued)
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
8
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain
the proper level of protection against freezing according to
the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
8
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467
WARNING!
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the
master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads
wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check system
for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
(Continued)
8
468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Selection Of Lubricant
Special Additives
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469
Fluid Level Check
Fluid And Filter Changes
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If
you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
8
470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
8
474 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
• Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
• Total weight your vehicle can carry.
• Tire size designed for your vehicle.
• Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs,
vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this
manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
476 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 477
• Economy
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
NOTE:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
8
478 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
judgement when determining proper
may look properly inflated even when
inflated.
a good quality
make a visual
inflation. Tires
they are under-
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 479
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
8
480 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 481
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
8
482 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
WARNING! (Continued)
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 483
Tire Types
WARNING!
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure
adversely affect the safety and handling of
designation or
sidewall. Use
to do so may
your vehicle.
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
8
484 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 485
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
8
486 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
These products and automatic car washes may damage
the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 487
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer
• Use on Front Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices
are recommended:
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire sizes
are not chainable.
• The use of 7 mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models without
a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
• Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire sizes
are not chainable.
• The use of 9 mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with a
Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
• The use of 7 mm snow chains is permitted with 225/
65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
• The use of 9 mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
8
488 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
• Use on Front Tires Only
• Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may
result if tire chains or traction devices are used with
original equipment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models without
a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit may result if tire
chains or traction devices are used with original
equipment size tires.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models may result if tire chains or traction devices are
used with original equipment size tires.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
(Continued)
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 489
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method
is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram.
This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
8
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
490 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
diagram.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in
each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your
vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should
be followed to balance tire wear.
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 491
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During
storage check battery charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical
system, check the battery charge every 30 days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protective waxes.
8
492 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades
and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care
not to damage the painted surface by dragging across
dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not
allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface
of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
higher than recommended on the tire placard and check
it periodically.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven for
at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the drivers door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals
to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the drivers door is closed.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
BODYWORK
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two
weeks or more, run idle the engine for approximately
five minutes, with the air conditioning system on and
high fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication of
the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to
the compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation.
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 493
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
The most common causes are:
Washing
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
8
494 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 495
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted,
or decoratedsurfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may notbe
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
8
496 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Leather Parts
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed to for
easy cleaning, and FCA recommends MOPAR total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats
as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .498
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .499
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .502
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .502
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
9
498 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The
VIN number also is stamped into the right front body, on
the right front seat cross member. With the seat in the rear
most position a flap in the carpet can be cut open and lifted
to reveal the VIN. It also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of
the engine block.
Vehicle Identification Number
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 499
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
9
500 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Torque Patterns
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 501
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Reformulated Gasoline
2.4L and 3.2L Engines
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if
a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
9
502 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 503
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline
is
recommended.
Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
504 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible
Fuel powered vehicles.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
E-85 General Information
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 505
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may
be used.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
When switching fuel types:
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA
US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to FCA
US LLC engines.
Fuel Requirements
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
9
506 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may
affect drivability.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 507
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.2L Engines
15.8 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API
5.5 Quarts
Certified)
3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API
6 Quarts
Certified)
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/
7.2 Quarts
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
3.2 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/
10 Quarts
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
60 Liters
5.2 Liters
5.6 Liters
6.8 Liters
9
9.5 Liters
508 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engines
Fuel Selection – 2.4L and 3.2L Engines
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 509
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
9
510 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE
J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .555
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal Settings
— Uconnect 5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal Settings
— Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 MEDIA HUB — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
10
512 MULTIMEDIA
▫ Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV). . . . . . . . . .569
MULTIMEDIA
513
UCONNECT RADIOS
1. Press the “Apps
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
” button to open the App screen.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
10
514 MULTIMEDIA
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If
Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
MULTIMEDIA
515
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
NOTE: Features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
10
516 MULTIMEDIA
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument
panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Back
buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to
turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 5.0 Settings
Push the SETTINGS or the MORE button on the faceplate,
then the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if equipped)
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock &
Date, Safety & Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort, Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, and Clear
Personal Data, Brakes and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu
or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
MULTIMEDIA
517
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
Selectable Options
Manual
+
Auto
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
+
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Language
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español)
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
10
518 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Units
Touchscreen Beep
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
Selectable Options
US
Metric
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
MULTIMEDIA
519
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Set Time and Format
12 hour
Selectable Options
24 hour
AM
PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
Set Date
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.
10
520 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If Equipped
Selectable Options
Near
Far
NOTE:
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far
setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving experience, select the
Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision WarnFar
Med
Near
ing (FCW) Active Braking
— If Equipped
NOTE:
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver
requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph
(8 km/h).
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early
Selectable Options
Medium
521
Late
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Warning“ feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late”
warning zone start point.
LaneSense Strength — If
Low
Medium
High
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Strength” feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential
lane departures.
10
522 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
Selectable Options
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the
vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
Front ParkSense Volume
Low
Medium
High
— If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Volume —
Low
Medium
High
If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse —
On
Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Lights
523
Lights and Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines — If
Equipped
ParkView Backup Camera
Fixed Guide Lines — If
Equipped
ParkView Backup Camera
Enable
Disable
Delay
NOTE:
When the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to
remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
10
524 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Electric Park Brake Service
Mode
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Electric Park Brake Service Mode “ feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation
brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
Selectable Options
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Headlight Illumination On Approach
525
Selectable Options
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto High Beam —
On
Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto High Beams” is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running
Yes
No
Lights
Flash Lights With
On
Off
Lock
10
526 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
On
Off
Horn With Lock
On
Off
Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped
On
Off
Passive Entry
On
Off
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock
Driver
All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you must
push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock
on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s
door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver
door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Memory Linked To FOB — If Equipped
527
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Memory Linked To FOB” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s
seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering
and exiting the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Alert — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Power Liftgate Alert” feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn
on.
10
528 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Easy Exit Seat — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Engine Off Power
0 sec
45 sec
5 minutes
10 minutes
Delay — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay
+
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
MULTIMEDIA
529
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the compass variance zone should be set for best results.
Setting Name
Compass Variance
1
2
3
4
5
6
Selectable Options
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NOTE:
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
Compass CalibraYes
tion
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
10
530 MULTIMEDIA
Compass Variance Zone Map
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Equalizer
Bass
Adjustable Options
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with
the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the
setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
Up Arrow
Button
Adjustable Options
Down ArLeft Arrow
Right Arrow Button
Button
row Button
531
Center “C”
Button
NOTE:
When in the “Balance/Fade” display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button
on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center
‘C’ Button” on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
Loudness — If Equipped
Yes
No
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input
10
532 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Selectable Options
List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Paired Audio Sources
List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Audio Sources” feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
MULTIMEDIA
533
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Channel Skip
Selectable Options
List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
10
534 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings
Press the “Apps” or the “Controls” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock,
Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal
Data, and System Information.
535
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press
the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the list of available settings.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
10
536 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
Selectable Options
Night
Day
+
Auto
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
+
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Set Language
537
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
10
538 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Sync Time With GPS
Set Time Hours
Selectable Options
+
-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes
+
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format
12hrs
24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA
539
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If Equipped
Selectable Options
Near
Far
NOTE:
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are
farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving experience,
select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of
you.
Forward Collision WarnFar
Med
Near
ing (FCW) Active Braking
— If Equipped
NOTE:
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver
requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph
(8 km/h).
10
540 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early
Selectable Options
Medium
Late
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Warning” feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late”
warning zone start point.
LaneSense Strength — If
Low
Medium
High
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Strength” feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential
lane departures.
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the
vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Front ParkSense Volume
— If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Volume —
If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
Low
Selectable Options
Medium
High
Low
Medium
High
541
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse —
On
Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
10
542 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Lights
Lights and Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines — If
Equipped
ParkView Backup Camera
Fixed Guide Lines — If
Equipped
ParkView Backup Camera
Enable
Disable
Delay
NOTE:
When the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to
remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Electric Park Brake Service
Mode
543
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Electric Park Brake Service Mode” feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle
integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes
(brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
Selectable Options
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
10
544 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Headlight Illuminated On Approach
Selectable Options
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
On
Off
Auto Dim High
Beams— If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running
Yes
No
Lights — If
Equipped
Flash Lights With
On
Off
Lock
MULTIMEDIA
545
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
10
546 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Lock
Sound Horn With Remote Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Selectable Options
Off
Driver Door
1st Press
2nd Press
All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks”, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks”, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key
fob unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors,” all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s
door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can
be used to unlock all doors (or use the key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If
Equipped
547
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
10
548 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Easy Exit Seat — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Engine Off Power
0 sec
45 sec
5 minutes
10 minutes
Delay — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay
+
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
MULTIMEDIA
549
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
Selectable Options
Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in the “Balance/Fade” display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the
“Speaker Icon” toward any location in the box.
Equalizer
Bass
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with
the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the
setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
+
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input
Loudness — If Equipped
10
550 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Selectable Options
List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Paired Audio Sources
List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Audio Sources” feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
MULTIMEDIA
551
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Tune Start
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip
List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
10
552 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
System Information
Selectable Options
Displays system information screen with software version.
MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
553
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/CD/
AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
10
554 MULTIMEDIA
CD Player
MEDIA HUB — IF EQUIPPED
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go
to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the player.
Media Hub
1 — USB Port
2 — SD Card Slot
3 — AUX Jack
Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an
External USB device, SD card or AUX electronic device to
be plugged into the port, slot or jack.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
555
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
10
556 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or 8.4/8.4
NAV system.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
Uconnect 5.0
MULTIMEDIA
557
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect
8.4 system.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
10
558 MULTIMEDIA
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4/8.4 NAV Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
Uconnect 5.0
MULTIMEDIA
559
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
10
Uconnect 8.4 /8.4 NAV
Radio
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
560 MULTIMEDIA
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD
player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
MULTIMEDIA
561
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
10
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
following commandsѧ
. After the beep, say one of the
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
562 MULTIMEDIA
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
and say Listen. (Must have compatible
Phone button
mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
Start without
No.
me.
Okay.
Where are you?
Are you there
Call me.
yet?
I need
I’ll call you later.
directions.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
RESPONSES
See you later.
I’ll be late.
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this
feature.
For
details
about
MAP,
visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
MULTIMEDIA
563
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
10
564 MULTIMEDIA
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation
at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
beep, say:
. After the
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
. After
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on
the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
565
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Register (8.4/8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
10
566 MULTIMEDIA
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Assist Button
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App
MULTIMEDIA
567
To link your internet radio accounts:
Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV)
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say the following command: “Send message to
John Smith.”
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth, pair
your phone and select the Via Mobile app you want to
play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream your
personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible mobile
device, you will also be able to start your vehicle and
lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message
you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process
your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with
your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text
messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
10
568 MULTIMEDIA
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
, then say: “YELP search.”
push the VR button
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your
vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like Uconnect
to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
MULTIMEDIA
569
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
10
Yelp
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not
available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian
market.)
SiriusXM Travel Link
570 MULTIMEDIA
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Siri Eyes Free Available
MULTIMEDIA
Getting Started
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
571
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound
system. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for a detailed pairing procedure.
Siri Enable Screens
1 — Select Settings on your
iPhone
2 — Select General
3 — Select Siri
4 — Enable Siri
10
Voice Recognition/Siri Buttons
1 — Phone Pick up Button
2 — Voice Recognition/Siri Eyes Free Button
3 — Phone Hang Up Button
NOTE: A push and release of the
button will start
normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold,
button will start Siri functions.
then release of the
572 MULTIMEDIA
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• ⬙Play Rolling Stones⬙
• ⬙Send text message to John⬙
• ⬙Read text message from Sarah⬙
• ⬙Take me to the nearest coffee shop⬙
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead to ensure your command is
understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
Siri Eyes Free
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
573
General Information
Automatic reply messages can be:
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
NOTE:
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
10
574 MULTIMEDIA
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .579
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .577
11
576 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 577
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
11
578 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
Service Contract
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 579
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located in the
owner’s information kit, for the terms and provisions of
FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized dealer
or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order
form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
11
580 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
12
582 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .286
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 216
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 433
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213, 216
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Air Bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 212, 248
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .447
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 453
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 452
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 451
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 140
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463, 507
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Audio Systems (Radio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Automatic Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264, 469
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
INDEX 583
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468, 469
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .113
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 444
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466, 499
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356, 425
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 442, 446
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 504
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 469
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .163
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
12
584 INDEX
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .241
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .236
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .233
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 465
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . .463, 507
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 159, 160, 162
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Disposal
INDEX 585
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .113
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . .283, 286
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .143
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 469
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .163
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 442
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 504
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 507
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 442, 446
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 507
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Engine Oil Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . .229, 433
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 504
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 504
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 460
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 250
12
586 INDEX
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 453
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 157, 250
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504, 505
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Fuel
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 504
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Fuel, Flexible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . .103, 107
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Gear Select Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Gross Axle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
INDEX 587
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .64
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . . .64
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 57, 383
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 154, 157
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Instrument Cluster Display
Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 407, 469
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
12
588 INDEX
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .21
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .23
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Key, Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
LaneSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 101
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 212, 248
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 159, 160, 162
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .146
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 157
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
INDEX 589
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .148, 192
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 157, 250
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 113
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .142, 157
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Locks
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .146, 163
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 57, 383
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 113
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Occupant Restraints .
Oil, Engine . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . .
Change Interval .
Checking . . . . . .
Dipstick . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.198
.445
.507
.445
.443
.443
12
590 INDEX
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 507
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446, 507
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .5, 579
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306, 313
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . .473
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 30, 31, 39
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306, 313
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
INDEX 591
Rear Window Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Shifting Into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . . . .373
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . .373
Shifting Out Of Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . .375
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . .375
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .553
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . .29, 527
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 527
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .205
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . .208, 209
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
12
592 INDEX
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199, 248
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .205
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199, 201, 203
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 50
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 41
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 44
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 140
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Power Transfer Unit, Shifting Into Power Transfer
Unit Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373, 375
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 157, 250
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570, 571
INDEX 593
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484, 485
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . .283, 286
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .553
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . . .213
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Tire And Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . .473
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250, 476, 484, 490
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 469
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 484
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 469
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473, 474
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
12
594 INDEX
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469, 476
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484, 485
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Tire Service Kit. . . . . . . . . . . .414, 415, 416, 418, 420, 421
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359, 363, 429
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363, 364
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264, 468
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . .103
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 157
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .29, 527
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 527
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572, 574
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
INDEX 595
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . .
Uconnect Voice Command . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . .
Universal Transmitter. . . . . . . .
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.526
.556
.490
.103
.205
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 113
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357, 474
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .32
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 443
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Windows
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 443
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Wireless Charging Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
12
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2017 Cherokee
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2017
17KL74-126-AB
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Cherokee
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising